2014 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual

2014 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual
2014 Grand Cherokee
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
14WK741-126-AB
2014
Third Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Grand Cherokee
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you
are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or
optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no
longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to
or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .8
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .9
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a “Starting And Operating” for further information.
four-wheel drive vehicle.
INTRODUCTION 5
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and not.
remain with the vehicle when sold.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech- control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
your satisfaction.
1
6 INTRODUCTION
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
Rollover Warning Label
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the Consult the following table for a description of the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or this Owner’s Manual:
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
INTRODUCTION 7
1
8 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read
this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
plate located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also is stamped into the right
front body, behind the right front seat. Move the right
front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped
VIN. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your
vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .23
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .20
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .26
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .26
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .28
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . .54
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .58
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .58
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .59
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .62
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
▫ Seat Belt Lock Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .108
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .67 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .74
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa- method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
tion).
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
push to operate the ignition switch.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
Emergency Key Removal
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorengine being shut off after two seconds.
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 secor unlocked.
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a possible by an authorized dealer.
SENTRY KEY®
RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatAfter cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it problems and loss of security protection.
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authocannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
CAUTION!
is one that has never been programmed.
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Syslock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, rized dealer.
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
Customer Key Programming
position.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the disturbance is still present (driver’s door,
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules Part 15
passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes,
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash
subject to the following conditions:
for an additional 15 minutes.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ• This device must accept any interference that may be ent. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
received, including interference that may cause unde- Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
sired operation.
one should go off in the future, you will need to know
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Rearming The System
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
liftgate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
locks, and power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Secu- horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
rity Alarm provides both audio and visual signals, the after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
horn will sound, the headlights will turn on, park lamps rearm itself.
General Information
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
(RKE) transmitter.
further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, 3. If any doors are open, close them.
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙.
To Disarm The System
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the the following methods:
key is physically removed from the ignition.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
vehicle:
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (refer to
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same
position.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
door the alarm will sound.
Tamper Alert
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
NOTE:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the • The front courtesy overhead console and door courRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
doors or open any door.
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the • The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur(extreme bottom position).
ther information.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position. open the power liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE
transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit- Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st Press
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Flash Lights With Remote Key
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect® . To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least
by the system.
one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the Programming Additional Transmitters
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
turn on.
performed at an authorized dealer.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
Transmitter Battery Replacement
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
(24 km/h) or greater.
Using The Panic Alarm
NOTE:
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
and horn will remain on.
housing or the printed circuit board.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
2
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
Separating RKE Transmitter Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it distance, check for these two conditions:
with rubbing alcohol.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
General Information
radios.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
NOTE:
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic • Fuel meets minimum requirement
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE trans• Vehicle theft alarm not active
mitter may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
To Enter Remote Start Mode
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The parking lights will flash vehicle
doors will lock, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Once the vehicle has started, the engine
will run for 15 minutes.
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
NOTE:
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
in the Remote Start mode.
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN cycle, press and release the START/STOP button.
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a NOTE:
third cycle.
• The message “Push Start Button” will display in the
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
EVIC until you push the START button.
Vehicle
• “Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will disPress and release the REMOTE START button one time or
play in the EVIC until you press the start button. Refer
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
further information.
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated steering
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
deactivated through the Uconnect® system. For more
information on Remote Start Comfort System operation
refer to “Uconnect®” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING! (Continued)
Manual Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in
the vehicle and the driver’s door is open, the doors will
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
not lock.
panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Power Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
Power Door Lock Switch
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
2
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
and if equipped will arm the theft alarm.
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
down the window, and open the door using the outside
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
door handle.
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower reKEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
sponse time.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a • If you unlock the doors using the passive entry door
handles, but do NOT pull the door handle, the doors
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
will automatically lock after 60 seconds.
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
NOTE:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to (1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
“Uconnect®” in “Understanding Your Instrument door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
Panel” for further information.
door is unlocked.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect®” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked then the liftgate will open
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors with the handle and no RKE Transmitter is required.
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the
electronic liftgate handle for a power open on vehicles
equipped with Power Liftgate. Press the electronic liftgate handle and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
Electronic Liftgate Handle/Liftgate Passive Entry Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Lock The Liftgate
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
located to the right of electronic liftgate handle.
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will only
lock the liftgate, the liftgate unlock feature is built into
the electronic liftgate handle.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in EVIC, all doors will unlock when you push the button
on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙ is
programmed in Uconnect®, the liftgate will unlock when
you press the button on the liftgate For further information, refer to “Uconnect®” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door NOTE:
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door and rear doors which operate the front
passenger and rear passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
2
Power Window Switches
The power window switches remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” movement, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
Auto Down Window Switches
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
To stop the window from going all the way up during the NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
close the window. Any impact due to rough road condithe first detent and release when you want the window to
tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
stop.
during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to
the first detent and hold it to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Auto Up Window Switches
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Button
Window Lockout Button
The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows Wind Buffeting
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
disable the window controls on the rear doors, press the pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls, ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
press the Window Lockout button again.
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will only
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with lock the liftgate, the liftgate unlock feature is built into
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear the electronic liftgate handle.
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the
electronic liftgate handle to open with one fluid motion.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate handle.
Passive entry/Lock Button Location
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pressing
the electronic liftgate handle (refer to Keyless
Enter-N-Go located in Things To Know Before
Starting) or by pressing the LIFTGATE button
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Press the
LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice within
five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate
is open, pressing the button twice within five seconds a
second time will close the liftgate.
Electronic Release Switch/Lock Only Button
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the front
overhead console, or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE
button located on left rear trim panel, near the liftgate
opening. Pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left
rear trim panel once will close the liftgate only, this
button cannot be used to open the liftgate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the EVIC) and the liftgate
chime will be audible. For further information, refer to
⬙Uconnect®⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your Instrument Panel⬙.
NOTE:
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an • The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
(0 km/h).
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
gate trim panel.
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
power liftgate functionality.
liftgate switches.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is • If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
meets sufficient resistance.
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
in gear, the liftgate will continue to power close. Howliftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
ever, vehicle movement may result in a detection of an
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
obstruction.
• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the
liftgate opening to operate. If the liftgate is not fully
open, press the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully
open the liftgate, and then press it again to close.
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open
position.
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow
manual operation.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Knee bolsters for front seat occupants
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
all passengers
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s and second
row center) include Automatic Locking Retractors
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
(ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into position
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
by extending the belt all the way out and then adjustrestraint)
ing the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
or secure a large item in a seat — if equipped
passenger
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment
can cause severe injury or death to infants in that
position.
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
severity and type of collision.
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltHere are some simple steps you can take to minimize the positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
buckled up in a rear seat.
their arm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
(Continued)
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an
collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
the belt go around your lap.
Latch Plate
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
Latch Plate to Buckle
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Removing Slack From Belt
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow it to retract fully.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
shoulder belt.
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
anchor point.
that fits you best.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
button, verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched by
pulling downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it
is locked into position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
position.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
First Row
Second Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
Center
N/A
ALR
Passenger
ALR
ALR
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
the entire belt is extracted.
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prenow in the Automatic Locking Mode.
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Refurther reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretencollision.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severwhether the severity, or type of rear impact will require ity and type of the impact.
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle
then down to engage the locking mechanism.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at 1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
a comfortable position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
AHR In Reset Position
NOTE:
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active
into the back decorative plastic half.
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authoReminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire deactivating BeltAlert®.
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occuBeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Seat Belt Lock Out
Seat Belt Extender
The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
the rear seat upper latch is engaged.
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts long enough. When it is not required, remove the exthroughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is tender and store it.
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column and a Knee Bolster
below the glove compartment.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for
Advanced Air Bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced protection for an
occupant during a side impact. The Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags are located in the outboard side of
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front the front seats.
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Driver Side
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Knee Bolster mounted below the
seat position.
glove compartment.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether NOTE:
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags, are located above the side windows and their
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag System Components
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
system components:
and Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
• Air Bag Warning Light
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bags and SABIC air bags during impacts that require
side air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
SABIC, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the SABIC. The
area where the side curtain air bag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SAB; the performance could
be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the required for this vehicle.
driver and the front passenger, and position front occuThe ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Air Bag.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, SABIC air bags, SAB air
bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as required,
depending on several factors, including the severity and
type of impact.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal
collisions depending on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags
and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced
Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air
Bag may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end
damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
away from an inflating air bag.
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck under- the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
rides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Adment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to
70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air especially applies to children.
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are de- located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
signed to activate only in certain side collisions.
air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental
bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of collision. Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to
full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 mil- children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick
when it is inflated.
liseconds.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity SABIC air bags, and driver/passenger knee air bags may
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC
SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
in determining appropriate response to impact events.
the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one- Enhanced Accident Response System
quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and the communication network remains intact, and the
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
event the ORC will determine whether to have the If A Deployment Occurs
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
ing functions:
immediately after deployment.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or SABIC - if equipped air bags may deploy on both sides of
the vehicle.
until the ignition key is turned off.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
the battery has power or until the ignition key is or all of the following may occur:
removed.
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
• Unlock the doors automatically.
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have defew days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to “Fuses” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the proper air bag fuses.
See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of Event Data Recorder (EDR)
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
the air bag system immediately.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
cycled to the ON/RUN.
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enis designed to record such data as:
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
crash investigation.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
were buckled/fastened;
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a times, including babies and children. Every state in the
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by United States, and every Canadian province, requires
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
NOTE: For additional information, refer
to www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafetyThere are different sizes and types of restraints for
index-53.htm
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
WARNING!
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardreach the highest weight or height allowed by their
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
convertible child seat.
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
WARNING!
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
Infants And Child Restraints
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear
seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit perithe vehicle seat?
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
way back?
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
or behind their back.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether
Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint LATCH Positions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages?
No
No
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center
seating position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes, center position
only.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to
install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symyou lean into the rear seat to install the child
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located on
the back of the seat. To access the top tether
strap anchorages behind the rear seat, pull the
carpeted floor panel away from the seat back, this will
expose the top tether strap anchorages.
60/40 Seat LATCH Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
2
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
WARNING!
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a typical installation instructions.
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Center Seat LATCH — Second Row 60/40
Vehicles With A Center Arm Rest Tether
Do not install a child restraint in the center position using
the LATCH system. Use the seat belt and tether anchor to For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
install a child seat in the center seating position.
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the 3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the
arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
strap located on the front of the arm rest.
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
2
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
seat backing.
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autoing position.
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direcBelt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
tions to attach a tether anchor.
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufaceasily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
turer’s instructions.
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit.
in any direction.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing Restraints in this Vehicle
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and
the following sections for more information about both
types of seat belts.
ALR / Anchor Locations
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
+ weight of the child restraint) for using
the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes, center position
only.
Yes
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt path
of the child restraint?
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be
twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not twist
the buckle stalk in a seating position
with an ALR retractor.
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webto pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
“click.”
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1.
2.
3.
4.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chilposition. For some second row seats, you may need to
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get
attach a tether anchor.
a better fit.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
in any direction.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
“click.”
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
restraint.
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
that seating position (see the charts above), move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear
seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat
back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
2
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING!
The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind the
seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage — Center Seating Position
Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
For center seating position route the tether strap over the
seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether
anchor located on the back of the seat.
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriAn unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
mental and should be avoided.
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “MainteENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Transporting Pets
CAUTION!
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, Defroster
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inopercollision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
able.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt Floor Mat Safety Information
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
The light should come on and remain on for
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
Air Bag Warning Light
2
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .124
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED . . .129
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Reclining Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .156
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .158
▫ Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . .
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Front Ventilated Seats With
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4A — If Equipped. . . . . . . . .149
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
. . . . . . .160
. . . . . . .162
. . . . . . .163
. . . . . . .163
. . . . . . .165
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . .165
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . .166
▫ Ambient Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .167
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Automatic Headlight Leveling —
HID Headlights Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights. . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Battery Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ High/Low Beam Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .174
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .178
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .179
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .182
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .190
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .191
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .196
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .201
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .202
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .206
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . .210 䡵 PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR
PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .213
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .224
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .234
▫ Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .235
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .236
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off —
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .225
With Uconnect® 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .244
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .245
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .248
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .249
▫ Using HomeLink®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .253
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
䡵 COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH
POWER SHADE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . .258
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .259
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .260
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .265
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Cargo Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Rear Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .279
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
3
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in
reverse gear to improve rear view viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Outside Mirrors
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
three detent positions:
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
• full forward
• full rearward and
• normal.
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive
position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, press
the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to
the normal driving position.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled,
a potential extra button push is required to get the
mirrors back to the home position. If the mirror does not
electrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot
area which can cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press the mirror select button for the mirror that
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, press
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped
The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
1 — Mirror Direction Control
rear window defroster if equipped. Some vehicles may
2 — Mirror Selection
not be equipped with rear window defroster, in this case
the heated mirrors will still function as intended. Refer to
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Feathe optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Switch
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror the visors.
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move
automatically.
slightly downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Programmable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out
the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
3
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane • The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The zone
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends apverify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
proximately 23 ft (7 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approxibeyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
mately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
driver of vehicles in these areas.
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
contamination so that the BSM system can function
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the deproperly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
tection zones.
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
NOTE:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
3
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
Warning Light Location
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles
that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Vehicles
that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains
in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the
warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in
speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
3
Overtaking/Passing
Overtaking/Approaching
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Opposing Traffic
Stationary Objects
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
3
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can Modes Of Operation
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the Modes Of Operation With EVIC
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Underalarms, including reducing the radio volume.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Modes Of Operation With Uconnect® System —
If Equipped
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Programmable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Blind Spot Alert
NOTE:
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio is muted.
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, RCP state always requests the chime.
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- Blind Spot Alert Off
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
object are present on the same side at the same time, both mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
used
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Power Seats — If Equipped
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
vehicle.
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
WARNING!
and the seatback.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining The Seatback
WARNING! (Continued)
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
(Continued)
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Passenger’s Power Seat
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
Some models are equipped with a six-way power passenger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
have reached the desired position.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on
the switch will raise and lower the position of the
support.
Power Lumbar Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
Some models may be equipped with manual front driver
or passenger seats. The seats can be adjusted forward or position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat
have latched.
cushion, near the floor.
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Adjustment Bar
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
WARNING!
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
WARNING!
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to
select HI-level heating. Press the soft-key a second time
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
to select LO-level heating. Press the soft-key a third time
driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel can be
to shut the heating elements OFF.
programmed to come on during a remote start. Refer to
“Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things To
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informawill be felt within two to five minutes.
tion.
Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start
Front Heated Seats With Uconnect® 5.0 —
If Equipped
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located in the Uconnect®
system screen.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Press the “Climate” hard-key located on the right side of
the Uconnect® display.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after a
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Front Heated Seats With Uconnect® 8.4/8.4A —
If Equipped
There are two heated seat soft-keys that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located in the Uconnect®
system screen.
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of the
Uconnect® display.
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to
select HI-level heating. Press the soft-key a second time
to select LO-level heating. Press the soft-key a third time
to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat
will be felt within two to five minutes.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after a
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
with heated seats. There are two heated seat switches that heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches for each heater are
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
located on the rear of the center console.
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
Rear Heated Seats
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
Rear Heated Seat Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Front Ventilated Seats With Uconnect® 8.4/8.4A —
If Equipped
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and pull air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler
in higher ambient temperatures.
To operate the system, press the “Controls” soft-key
located on the bottom of the Uconnect® display.
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to
select HI-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a second
time to select LO-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a
third time to shut off the seat ventilation.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of
rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
3
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or
loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the
Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is
secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active
Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to
follow this warning could cause personal injury if
the Active Head Restraint is deployed.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
3
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard headrests
are not removable.
Rear Head Restraint
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to
fold down easily.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
60/40 Split Rear Seat
To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating
room.
Rear Seat Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
NOTE:
• Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the left
outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.
• Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the right
outboard seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
Rear Seat Folded
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Rear Seat
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of
desired radio station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the
same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
Rear Seat Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. One RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
3
• The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory
save function
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Memory Seat Switch
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming The Memory Feature
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the 1. Insert the ignition key fob, and turn the ignition switch
to the ON/RUN position.
following:
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer- 3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
steering column [if equipped], and radio station pre- 4. Within 5 seconds, press and release either of the
sets).
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display which
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
memory position has been set.
switch.
NOTE:
4. Within 5 seconds, press and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle • Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
Information Center (EVIC) will display which
memory profile.
memory position has been set.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
• The Recall Memory with Remote Linked to Memory To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following:
feature can be enabled through the Uconnect® system
1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the
screen. Refer to “Customer- Programmable Features —
ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless
Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in “Understanding
Enter-N-Go).
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set,
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ for instrucof two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the tions on how to set a memory profile.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument
cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC.
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Programmable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- 4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
formation.
transmitter within 10 seconds.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your Driver Two Memory Position Recall
memory settings by following steps 1-4 above and press• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
ing the UNLOCK button (instead of LOCK) on the RKE
memory switch, press MEMORY button number 2 on
transmitter in Step 4.
the memory switch.
Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
MEMORY buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a
recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, driver’s mirror and
the steering column stop moving. A delay of one second
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the will occur before another recall can be selected.
memory switch , press MEMORY button number 1 on
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
the memory switch.
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF,
for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
(22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The
seat will return to its previously set position when you
place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move about
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is
or Easy Entry.
greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set Entry and Easy Exit position.
position when you place the ignition into the ACC or
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
RUN position.
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “CustomerKeyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move to a Programmable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings
position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
driver seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in information.
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left
and lift the hood.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
Safety Latch Location
Hood Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
the wiper system is on. The programmable settings are
available in the in the Uconnect® system screen. Refer
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
to “Customer- Programmable Features — Uconnect®
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
Access 8.4 Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
Panel” for further information.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
System” and it is activated, the headlights will automati90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
approximately four minutes after the wipers completely
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head- stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers And Washers” in this
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
section for further information.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the dayIf your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it time, the instrument panel lights will automatically dim
also has this customer-programmable feature. When to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Lights” in this
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the section for further information.
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
and other obstructions (sticker, toll box, etc.) on the
windshield or camera lens will cause the system to
function improperly.
The automatic high beam system provides increased
forward lighting at night by automating high beam
control through the use of a digital camera mounted on To Activate
the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle
1. Enable the Automatic High Beams through the
specific light and automatically switches from high
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Probeams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out
grammable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings
of view.
” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furNOTE:
ther information.
• If the windshield or automatic high beam mirror is 2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
replaced, the automatic high beam mirror must be
position.
re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See your local
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
authorized dealer.
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
To Deactivate
Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
Only
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
operation of low beams).
automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
reactivate the system.
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
Headlights — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity) come on
This system automatically swivels the headlight beam
whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is
pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in
not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until
the direction the vehicle is steering.
the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be NOTE:
used for normal nighttime driving.
• Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on,
the headlights will initialize by performing a brief
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will turn off autosequence of rotations.
matically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on
again when the turn signal is not operating.
• The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when
the vehicle is moving forward.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off Parking Lights And Panel Lights
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
further information.
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.
To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
Headlight Delay
back to the O (Off) position.
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for Fog Lights — If Equipped
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is switch to the parking light or headlight position and
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight pushing in the headlight rotary control.
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
The headlight delay time is programmable in the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer-Programmable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to the its farthest upward position, or if equipped, when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. When a door is open and the
interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the
way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all the interior
Fog Light Operation
lights to go out. This is also known as the “Party” mode
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights because it allows the doors to stay open for extended
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
headlights are required during the day.
Dimmer Control
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way
up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over- side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
head console.
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
pressed.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy Lights
Ambient Light
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibilsecond time.
ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area.
Courtesy Lights
Ambient Light
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
steering column.
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Multifunction Lever
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
located on the end of the lever. For information on the
rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
Flash-To-Pass
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
Multifunction Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for
low wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Windshield Wiper Operation
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the
Windshield Washer Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
cycles, then turn off.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
WARNING!
3
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
Mist Control
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when
ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The • Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate • A customer programmable feature in the Electronic
the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
to activate this feature.
Sensing feature to be turned off. Refer to “Electronic
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting 5 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
OFF position when not using the system.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
NOTE:
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temwiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps Steering Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel. Press the “Heated Steering Wheel” soft-key a
second time to turn the heated steering wheel off.
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect® System.
Controls Soft-Key
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — CANCEL
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control ON.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed. Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE
CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM will appear indicating
what speed was set. An indicator CRUISE will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pressing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set the SET + button. If the button is continually pressed, the
set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph (10 km/h)
speed memory.
increments until the button is released. The increase in set
To Resume Speed
speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
To decrease speed while the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
Control is set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is
20 mph (30 km/h).
continually held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will
To Vary The Speed Setting
continue to decrease until the button is released. Release
the button when the desired speed is reached, and the
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button. If new set speed will be established.
To Deactivate
the button is continually pressed, the set speed will Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
continue to increase until the button is released, then the (1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
new set speed will be established.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, the On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
SET - button. If the button is continually pressed, the set Control.
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h)
increments until the button is released. The decrease in
WARNING!
set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
To Accelerate For Passing
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vePress the accelerator as you would normally. When the hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Can only apply a maximum of 40% of the vehicle’s braking capability, and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode”
in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) cruise control will not react
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
1 — NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
— SET+/ACCEL
— RESUME
— SET-/DECEL
— DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
— ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
— DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
— CANCEL
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica- NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
tions to the vehicle will effect the performance of the conditions:
Adaptive Cruise Control.
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When you apply the brakes.
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
• When the parking brake is set.
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
(30 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, • When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) dis- • When the brakes are overheated.
plays “ACC Ready.”
• When the driver door is open.
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC displays time, the system will turn off and the EVIC will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
“ACC Ready.”
To Activate
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
speed will only be determined by the position of the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The EVIC
accelerator pedal.
will display the set speed.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Cancel
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
• The brake pedal is applied.
NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS off,
ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
• You depress the brake pedal.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
To Turn Off
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.
• You push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/
OFF button.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- • You push the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
ON/OFF button.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• You turn OFF the ignition.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
To Resume
WARNING! (Continued)
If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The EVIC will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than
2 seconds, then the driver will either have to press the To Vary The Speed Setting
Resume button, or apply the throttle to reengage the
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
ACC to the existing Set Speed.
pressing the SET + button.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
(Continued)
If the SET + button is continually pressed, the set speed
will continue to increase in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments
until the button is released. The increase in set speed is
reflected in the EVIC display.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by • The ACC system applies the brakes when following
pressing the SET - button.
the host vehicle and will hold the brakes at a complete
stop for 2 seconds and then release.
Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
If the SET - button is continually pressed, the set speed
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downwill continue to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to mainuntil the button is released. The decrease in set speed is
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
reflected in the EVIC display.
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
NOTE:
exceeds normal range (overheated).
• When you override and push the SET + button or SET - Setting The Following Distance In ACC
buttons, the current vehicle speed will become the set
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
speed of the system.
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
will automatically slow the vehicle.
distance setting displays in the EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
3
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Set- • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
ting — Increase button and release. Each time the button
the sensor.
is pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar
• The vehicle ahead slows to a complete stop 0 mph
(longer).
(0 km/h) for more than 2 seconds and the system
To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance
automatically disengages itself.
Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the
• The distance setting is changed.
button is pressed, the distance setting decreases by one
bar (shorter).
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually,
if necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
speed.
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound Overtake Aid
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking When driving with ACC engaged and following a target
capacity.
vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic,
Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left
hand side of the Target vehicles.
When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive
traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC
system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this
condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on
the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right
turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no
Brake Alert
When this occurs, you should immediately apply the longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it
brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location
with left hand drive traffic.
vehicle ahead.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The wheel) and the following will display in the EVIC:
EVIC is located in the center of the instrument cluster. ACC SET
The information it displays depends on ACC system
When ACC is set, the set speed will continue to display in
status.
the lower right hand corner of the cluster.
Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
the following displays in the EVIC:
• Distance Setting Change
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• System Cancel
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap• Driver Override
tive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• System Off
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • ACC Proximity Warning
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise • ACC Unavailable Warning
Control Ready.”
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
Warning
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
The “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” this warning may temporarily occur.
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
NOTE: If the “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
Radar Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed)
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as Cruise Control is still available. For additional informain snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become tion refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, Mode” in this section.
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC will display “ACC /
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
system will deactivate.
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
The “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” vehicle behind the lower grille.
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
Display Warnings And Maintenance
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- When the condition that deactivated the system is no
tant to note the following maintenance items:
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
simply reactivating it.
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
NOTE:
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so • If the “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
require a sensor realignment.
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
your authorized dealer.
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
market grille or modifying the grille is not recomincluding transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
ACC / FCW operation.
malfunction.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles
The “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per- If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibil- examine the windshield and the camera located on the
ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
system may also become temporarily blinded due to require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
When the condition that created limited functionality is
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC will
no longer present, the system will return to full functiondisplay “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
ality.
Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.
NOTE: If the “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
The “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflecfacing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
tive tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC / FCW system will
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Store the sensor and bracket assembly in a safe location.
The wiring and connector must be stowed properly after
NOTE: When off-roading, it may be advisable to remove
the sensor and bracket assembly is removed.
the ACC sensor. The sensor is located behind the front
lower grille in the center of the vehicle. After removing A connector plug is stowed on top of the bumper beam.
the lower fascia, you may remove the lower sensor and Insert the wiring connector into the connector plug.
bracket assembly.
NOTE: When the sensor is removed, Adaptive Cruise
To remove the sensor follow these instructions:
Control, Normal Cruise Control, and Forward Collision
1. Unplug the connector by depressing the two tabs on Warning will not be available and the forward collision
the connector and pulling it out. Do not pull by the warning On/Off button will stay illuminated. Once the
vehicles ignition has been cycled the system will re-set
wiring or use any tools to remove the connector.
and resume to full functionality.
2. Remove the wiring christmas tree attachment from the
To reinstall the sensor and bracket assembly reverse the
back of the bracket.
process above. The fastener torque required to assembly
3. Remove the two M6 fasteners that connect the bracket the bracket back to the beam is 6.6 ft lbs (9 N·m).
to the bumper.
Removing ACC Sensor For Off-Roading
NOTE: Do not change the adjustment fasteners or pull
the sensor off of the bracket. Doing so may misalign the
sensor.
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Offset Driving
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/FCW
Unavailable Service Required”or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly.
The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
NOTE: Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
General Information
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
Classification Specifications:
47 C.F.R. Part 15
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising
speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (30 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
To change between the different cruise control modes,
press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button which turns the ACC and the NORMAL
(Fixed Speed) CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the NORMAL
(Fixed Speed) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF button will
result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode,
the system will not react to vehicles ahead. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control ON.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed. Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE
CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM will appear indicating
what speed was set. An indicator CRUISE will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pressing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of (1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding
the SET + button. If the button is continually pressed, the
set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph (10 km/h)
increments until the button is released. The increase in set
speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, the
set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the
SET - button. If the button is continually pressed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h)
increments until the button is released. The decrease in
set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
To decrease speed while the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is
continually held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released. Release
the button when the desired speed is reached, and the
new set speed will be established.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
• You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
• You press the CANCEL button.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
(overheated).
Operation
• The shift lever is removed from the Drive position.
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
To Resume Speed
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button visual warnings (within the EVIC), and may apply a
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are
20 mph (30 km/h).
intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,
To Turn Off
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
memory if:
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
• You push the Normal Fixed Speed ON/OFF button.
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
• You turn off the ignition.
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of autonomous braking to help slow the
vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the
driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the system
determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision
by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
NOTE:
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
(10 km/h).
vehicle in front of you.
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
The forward collision button is located on the switch
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
panel below the Uconnect® display.
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns off).
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing limited autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from 5. Press the “Active Braking” On or Off soft-key.
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
NOTE: A check mark will appear in the selection box to
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
indicate the setting.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
To change the FCW and Active Braking settings with
To change the FCW and Active Braking settings with Uconnect® 5.0 System Screen — if equipped.
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4A System Screen — if equipped.
NOTE: The settings can only be changed when the
NOTE: The settings can only be changed when the vehicle is in PARK.
vehicle is in PARK.
Follow these steps to set the FCW and Active Braking:
Follow these steps to set the FCW and Active Braking:
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of
the Uconnect® display.
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
4. Press the “FWD Collision Warning”, Far or Near
soft-key for your desired preference.
1. Press the “+ MORE” hard-key located on the lower
right side of the Uconnect® system.
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
3. Press the “Safety/Assistance” soft-key.
4. Press the first “FWD Collision W...” soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
5. Press the “FWD Collision Warning” Far or Near NOTE:
soft-key for your desired preference. Then press the
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
back arrow.
driver after ignition shut down.
6. Press the second “FWD Collision W...” soft-key.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
7. Press the “Active Braking” On or Off soft-key.
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the car, stationary objects that are far away,
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
higher rate of speed.
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you when you are farther away and it applies • FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
screens.
avoid a possible collision.
FCW Limited Warning
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily,
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality.
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, the active braking may not be fully available.
Once the condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see your
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or from the Uconnect® System
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately (if available). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Program6 mph (9 km/h).
mable Features)” or ⬙Uconnect® Settings” (if available)
ParkSense® Sensors
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/ information.
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Elecdirection, depending on the location, type and orientatronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in
tion of the obstacle.
Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforParkSense® Warning Display
mation.
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the CustomerProgrammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC will display a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
the object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
the park assist ready system status.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone
will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast,
to continuous.
ParkSense® Display
Park Assist Ready
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
3
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arc
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Radio Volume
Reduced
No
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
4th Solid
3rd
Solid
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2nd
Flashing
Yes
1st
Flashing
Yes
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the When the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System is malParkSense® switch.
functioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to dis- chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
able the system, the instrument cluster will dis- “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or
play the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for ap- the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
proximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the further information. When the shift lever is moved to
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition,
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” the EVIC will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long as the vehicle
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when ParkSense® is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense® switch LED operate.
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense®
switch is pressed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense® switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be ON.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
NOTE:
(EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the underside of
the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operdirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
ating properly.
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the EVIC will
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the • On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense®
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
radio when it is sounding a tone.
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
CAUTION!
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide • ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
fascia/bumper.
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
close proximity.
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
using ParkSense®.
EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately
7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will become
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing ParkSense® Sensors
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limibumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
tations of this system and recommendations.
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientachanged to the ON/RUN position.
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense® is enabled at one of
these shift lever positions, the system will remain active
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
(if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” or ⬙Uconnect® Settings” (if equipped)
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
ParkSense® Warning Display
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the deThe ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed
tected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
if Sound and Display is selected from the CustomerCenter (EVIC)/Settings” in Understanding Your InstruProgrammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
ment Panel” for further information.
Information Center (EVIC) or from the Uconnect® System
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
The warning display will turn ON indicating the system a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the the object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected. If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone
will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast,
to continuous.
ParkSense® Display
Park Assist Ready
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
3
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
(Chime)
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
None
Arcs
Radio Volume
Reduced
None
No
WARNING
79-39 in
(200-100 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
Single 1/2
Second Tone
(for rear only)
4th Solid
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
ALERTS
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
Slow (for rear
only)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Continuous
3rd Solid
Yes
2nd Flashing
Yes
1st Flashing
Yes
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
alert (chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an ParkSense® switch.
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disbrake pedal is applied.
able the system, the instrument cluster will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for apAdjustable Chime Volume Settings
proximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if equipped.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
If Uconnect® System is equipped, chime volume settings shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
will not be accessible from the EVIC.
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when ParkSense®
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense® switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense®
through ignition cycles.
switch is pressed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense® switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be ON.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System
When the ParkSense® System is malfunctioning, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
message. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and
the system has detected a faulted condition with the front
sensors, the EVIC will display ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at the
front sensor location of the car graphic. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts at the rear sensor location.
When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition with the rear
sensors, the EVIC will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense® will not operate. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the underside of
the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction
and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear see an authorized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
• When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn • Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense®
system operating properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense®
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position. A lowered tailgate could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView® camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned ON), The rear view image with dynamic
grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after
shifting out of ⬙REVERSE⬙ unless the forward vehicle
speed exceeds 8 MPH, the transmission is shifted into
⬙PARK⬙ or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
When displayed, dynamic grid lines will illustrate the
width of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will
indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to
a hitch/receiver. The static grid lines will show separate
zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With Uconnect® 5.0
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
1. Turn the Radio on.
2. Press the “Settings” button.
3. Press the “Safety & Assistance” soft-key.
4. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview®
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
NOTE: A check mark will appear in the selection box to OVERHEAD CONSOLE
indicate the system is turned ON.
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Opener (HomeLink®), power liftgate and power sunroof
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4A
switches may also be included, if equipped.
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of
the Uconnect® display.
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
4. Press the “Parkview Backup camera” soft-key to turn
the ParkView® system ON or OFF.
NOTE: A check mark will appear in the selection box to
indicate the system is turned ON.
Overhead Console
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartsecond time.
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light
in view.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the inditwo seconds each time). If the garage door opener/
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
device activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
follow these steps:
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indinot release the button.
cator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programfrequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Reming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
steps.
from slow to rapid.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
and observe the indicator light.
before 1995.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transfollow these steps:
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do time-out in the same manner.
not release the button.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all door or gate motor.
remaining steps.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
door may open and close while you are programming.
not release the button.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/
and observe the indicator light.
Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and follow all
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programremaining steps.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
Using HomeLink®
Troubleshooting Tips
To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink®
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any
time.
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not leave the key in the ignition switch (or leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run position).
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
the sunroof.
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
Opening Sunroof — Express
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obClosing Sunroof — Express
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucsecond and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind Buffeting
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Venting Sunroof — Express
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurand the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
Sunshade Operation
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Sunroof Maintenance
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is the glass panel.
open.
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switches remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has
been turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView® sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
CommandView® Sunroof and Power Shade Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not leave the key in the ignition switch (or leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run position).
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within onehalf second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade
will open fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within onehalf second and the sunroof will close automatically from
any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open
Express Close operation, any movement of the switch operation, any movement of the shade switch will stop the
shade.
will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward .
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Press and hold the shade switch
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
Opening Power Shade — Express
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
Press the shade switch rearward and release it within rearward again.
one-half second and the shade will open automatically
Closing Power Shade — Express
from any position. The shade will open and stop automatically at the half-open position. Press the shade switch Press the switch forward and release it within onerearward again and release it within one-half second and half second and the shade will close automatically from
the shade will open automatically to the full-open position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
any position. The shade will close fully and stop auto- sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucmatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop release to Express Close.
the shade.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, it will automatically close in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
during the ⬙Sun Shade Express Close⬙ movement.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
Pinch Protect Feature
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob- with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the minimize the buffeting or open any window.
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunroof Maintenance
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
the glass panel.
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
Ignition OFF Operation
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
The power sunroof switches can be programmed to “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Refer to “Elec- the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer- the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
Programmable Features (System Setup)” in “Under- to the battery and powered at all times.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
NOTE: Opening either front door will cancel this fea• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
ture.
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
Sunroof Fully Closed
discharge.
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR®
sunroof is fully closed.
knob and element must be used.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
3
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward
on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain
access to this power outlet.
Front Power Outlet
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
area.
Center Console Outlet
Rear Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
NOTE: The rear power outlet can be switched to “battery” powered all the time by switching the power outlet
right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel.
3
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter
Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
3
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading CUPHOLDERS
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers
prior to using the inverter.
located in the center console.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Front Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers STORAGE
located in the fold-down center armrest.
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
3
Rear Cupholders
Glove Compartment
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the Door Storage
latch and lower the glove box door.
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
access.
Opened Glove Compartment
Door Panel Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
The center console contains both an upper and a lower the small latch located on the lid.
storage area.
Console Features
3
Storage Compartment Latches
Storage Compartment
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVD player
lower storage compartment.
located in the center console.
Lower Storage Compartment
Lower Storage Compartment CD/DVD Player If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
WARNING!
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
3
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Press And Release
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high, Cargo Storage Bins
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
There are four removable storage bins located in the rear
cargo area. There are two storage bins located on either
side of the cargo area.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer,
the passenger side cargo area will not be available.
Three-Press Switch
Rear Storage Bins
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
Two additional storage bins are located under the load
floor. To access the lower storage bins, raise the load floor
and attach the tether hook (attached to the bottom of the
load floor) to the liftgate opening.
3
Lower Storage Bins
Tether Strap
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
Rear Cargo Cover
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
3
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident,
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the mulRotating the center portion upward once more
tifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
will activate the washer pump which will conThe rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
tinue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon
located at the middle of the lever.
release of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper operation. When this rotary control is in
the OFF position, rotating it downward will activate the
rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long
as the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle
several times before returning to the parked position.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is
released the pump will resume normal operation.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
3
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park” window defroster only when the engine is operating.
position.
If the flipper glass is open, the rear window wiper/
washer functionality is interrupted and the wiper stops at
that “park” position. When the flipper glass is closed, the
rear wiper will resume wiper/washer functionality after
five seconds.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Press this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the
crossbar is in the desired position, retighten the with the
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
wrench to lock the crossbar into position.
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be NOTE:
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
in use, place the front and rear crossbars approxidealer can order and install MOPAR® crossbars built
mately 24 in (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction
specifically for this roof rack system.
can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar
forward or aft using increments of 1 in (2.5 cm).
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying • If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
improved satellite radio reception, avoid placing the
rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna.
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight turns • The grab handles on the back of the vehicle (if
using the anti-theft wrench provided with the MOPAR®
equipped) are not to be used as a towing feature.
crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the desired position,
3
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do
not carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or some other protection between
the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ EVIC Red Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ EVIC Green Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .285
▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . .311
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . .299
䡵 Uconnect® ACCESS SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .329
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED. . .329
▫ EVIC Amber Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . .
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
䡵 CD/DVD/BLU-RAY DISC MAINTENANCE . . .331
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .331
. . . . . .332
. . . . . .332
. . . . . .338
. . . . . .339
. . . . . .341
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
6 — Lower Switch Bank
7 — Hazard Switch
8 — Storage Bin (SD Card, AUX, USB Media Hub)
9 — ESC Button
10 — Ignition Switch
11 — Hood Release
12 — Fuel Door Release
13 — Headlight Switch
14 — Dimmer Control
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to the
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
8. Speedometer
5. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
Indicates vehicle speed.
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog 9. Selectable EVIC Information
lights are on.
This area of the cluster will display selectable informa6. Selectable EVIC Information
tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For
This area of the cluster will display selectable informa- further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” of your owners
further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa- manual for more information.
tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” of your owners
10. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
manual for more information.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
7. Turn Signal Indicator
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn sigmonitors engine and automatic transmission connals when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
will chime, and an EVIC message will appear if either the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
turn signal is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced
if the light stays on through several of your typical
driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
11. Electronic Park Brake Failure Indicator — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Parking
Brake system requires service.
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Engine Temperature Indicator
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” of your owners manual for more
information.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
WARNING! (Continued)
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
This light monitors various brake functions,
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
including brake fluid level and parking brake
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
application. If the brake light turns on it may
dropped below a specified level.
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
13. Brake Warning Light
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle
where the fuel door is located. The pointer shows the
level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
14. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
15. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
should be checked monthly when cold and
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apinflated to the inflation pressure recommended
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
inspected by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when approximately one minute and then remain continuously
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subseAccordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the syspossible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has to continue to function properly.
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
16. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display/ When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows
Odometer Display
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) messages.
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve- Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” of your
owners manual for more information.
hicle has been driven.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
17. Selectable EVIC Menu
19. Vehicle Security Light
This area of the cluster will display the EVIC selectable
menu. For further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” of your
owners manual for more information.
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
ignition is first turned on.
18. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
20. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
Light — If Equipped
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” of your owners manual for further information.
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
21. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
22. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pressing the switches mounted on the
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Digital Speedometer
instrument cluster.
• Vehicle Info
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Radio Info
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Location
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Arrow Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll
wheel:
upward through the main menu and submenus (Main Gauge, MPH/km/h, Vehicle
Info, Terrain, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy,
Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
• DOWN Arrow Button
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus (Main Gauge, MPH/km/h, Vehicle
Info, Terrain, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy,
Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
• RIGHT Arrow Button
EVIC Buttons
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
2. Audio / Phone Information and Sub-menu Information — Whenever there are sub-menus available, the
Press and release the LEFT arrow button to
position within the sub-menus is shown here.
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item.
3. Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
• OK Button
4. Telltales/Indicators
Press the OK button to access/select the information 5. Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)
screens or sub-menu screens of a main menu item. Press
and hold the OK arrow button for two seconds to reset 6. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG)
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
7. Air Suspension Status
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
8. 4WD Status
The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the 9. Selectable Gauge 2
cluster and consists of eight sections:
10. Selectable Gauge 1
1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings and
white for on demand information.
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as long
as the condition that activated it remains active) and can
be reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As
long as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed
in the EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of
this message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp
Out” and “Low Tire Pressure”.
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds
and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this
message type is “Automatic High Beams On”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Oil Change Required
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
ON/ RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec- 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
onds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
within 10 seconds.
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the 3. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
OFF/LOCK position.
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the
following procedure.
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Service Airbag System
• Traction Control Off
• Washer Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Oil Change Due
• Fuel Low
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Power Steering
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to XX”
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Lights On
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Turn Signal On
• Service Airbag System
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Key in Ignition
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Remote Start Active Key to Run
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Doors Open
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Tailgate Open
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Gear Not Available
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Shift Not Allowed
• Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Autostick Unavailable Service Required
• Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved
• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
• Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved
• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
• Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
• Service Air Suspension System Immediately
• Service Transmission
• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height
• Service Shifter
• Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open
• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
• Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance
• Washer Fluid Low
• Entry/Exit Watch For Clearance
• Service Air Suspension System
• Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For jacking And
Tire Change
• Normal Ride Height Achieved
• Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved
• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
• Fuel Saved Gal
• Fuel Saved L
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low.
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale
EVIC Amber Telltales
This telltale indicates that the transmission
fluid temperature is running hot. This may
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telloccur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.
tales. These telltales include:
If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and
• Low Fuel Telltale
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUWhen the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until turns off.
fuel is added.
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Service Forward Collision Warming
EVIC Red Telltales
This light warns the driver of a potential collision with This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
the vehicle in front and prompts the driver to take action telltales include:
in order to avoid the collision. For further information, • Door Ajar
refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “UnderThis light will turn on to indicate that one or
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
more doors may be ajar.
• Service Adaptive Cruise Control
This light will turn on when a ACC is not • Oil Pressure Warning Light
operating and needs service. For further informaThis telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If
tion, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.” the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for
• Electronic Park Brake Failure
four minutes when this light turns on.
This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
dealer for assistance.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing.
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
• Electric Power Steering Malfunction – If Equipped
This light warns of an overheated engine condiThis telltale is on when the Electric Power
Steering is not operating and needs service.
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
• Liftgate Ajar
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
may be ajar.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, EVIC Green Telltales
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve• Electronic Speed Control SET
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
This telltale will illuminate green when the elecnormal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
tronic speed control is SET. For further inforservice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
mation, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to scroll through the information sub-menus and press the OK button to select or
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
reset the following resettable sub-menus:
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
EVIC.
Air Suspension – If Equipped
EVIC Selectable Menu Items
Digital Speedometer
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button Only
until the Digital display icon is highlighted in the Oil Temp
EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button
to scroll through the sub-menus and press the Oil Life
OK button to change the display between km/h and mph. Battery Voltage
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the
EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button
and Coolant Temp will be displayed. Press the
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
to the main menu.
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and
release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
will be displayed:
Tire Pressure
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is Trip A
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in
the EVIC (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or
Trip B). The Trip A information will display the
following:
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
• Distance
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire • Average Fuel Economy
Pressure System” is displayed.
• Average Speed
• Elapsed Time
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Trip B
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted.
Press and release the Left or Right arrow button until the Trip B icon is highlighted in the
EVIC (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or
• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG BarTrip B). The Trip B information will display the
graph)
following:
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Distance
• Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
• Average Fuel Economy
Stored Messages
• Average Speed
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Press and release the UP arrow button until the
Messages display icon is highlighted in the
EVIC. This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pressing the RIGHT arrow
button will allow you to see what the stored messages are.
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio
Driver Assist
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
button until the Driver Assist display icon is
until the Audio display icon is highlighted in the
highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button
RIGHT arrow button to display the Adaptive
to scroll through the sub-menus and press the
Cruise
Control
sub-menu. For further information, refer
OK button display the active source.
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in
Screen Setup
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Terrain
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Screen Setup display icon is
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
button until the Terrain display icon is highRIGHT arrow button to enter the Screen Setup
lighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
sub-menu. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
RIGHT arrow button to display the Selecwhat information is displayed in the instrument cluster
Terrain,
Air
Suspension, Drivetrain, Vehicle Pitch, Vehicle
as well as the location that information is displayed.
Roll, Vehicle Altitude and Wheel Articulation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Diagnostics — If Equipped
Upper Left
• None
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
• Compass
button until the Diagnostics display icon is
highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the • Outside Temp (default setting)
RIGHT arrow button to display the diagnostic
• Oil Temp
trouble codes and descriptions.
• Current Gear: On
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
• Current Gear: Off
Odometer
• 000
• Time
• 000.0
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Standard (PRND) Gear Indicator
• Average MPG
• Single Character (D) Gear Indicator
• Current MPG
• Trip A
• Trip B
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Upper Right
• None
• Compass (default setting)
• Outside Temp
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
• Cancel
• Okay
• Oil Temp
Uconnect® ACCESS SETTINGS
• Time
The Uconnect® Access system uses a combination of soft
and hard keys located on the center of the instrument
panel that allows you to access and change the customer
programmable features.
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trip A
• Trip B
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Hard-Keys
Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect® Access
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect® Access system may also have a Screen
Off and Back hard-keys located below the system.
Press the Screen Off hard-key to turn off the Uconnect®
Access screen. Press the Screen Off hard-key a second
time to turn the screen on.
Uconnect® Access soft-keys and hard-keys
1 — Uconnect Access Soft-Keys
2 — Uconnect Access Hard-Keys
Press the Back hard-key to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect® Access system.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete either press the Back
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® Access display.
Arrow soft-key or the Back hard-key to return to the
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
previous menu or press the X soft-key to close out of the
Access 8.4 Settings
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft-keys
Press the Apps soft-key, then press the Settings soft-key to on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up
display the menu setting screen. In this mode the or down through the available settings.
Uconnect® Access system allows you to access program- Display
mable features that may be equipped such as Display,
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings
Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
will be available.
Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation, Compass
• Display Mode
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SiriusXM Setup.
Soft-Keys
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
time.
release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the arrow back soft-key.
desired mode. Once in the desired mode press and
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale • Units
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
soft-key.
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back • Voice Response Length
soft-key.
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re• Set Language
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a
When in this display, you may select one of three
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
to return to the previous menu.
the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desired
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Touchscreen Beep
Clock
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is
pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Sync Time With GPS
When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting touch
the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-mark
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a previous menu.
designated turn within a programmed route. To make • Set Time Hours
your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To make
your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
hours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
• Set Time Minutes
• Front Collision Sensitivity — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be
set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the
Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you
are farther away. This gives you the most reaction time. To
change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the
Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision when
• Time Format
you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. This
When in this display, you may select the time format allows for a more dynamic driving experience. To change
display setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a the FCW status, touch and release the OFF, Near or Far
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting, button. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust
the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen.
Safety / Assistance
• Park Assist
After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the follow- The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
ing settings will be available.
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or
Sound and Display. To change the Park Assist status, touch
and release the Sound Only or Sounds and Display button.
Then touch the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense®
Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN
position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt Mirrors
In Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the
Off, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
• ParkView® Backup Camera
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be • Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your and operating information. To make your selection, touch
selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera soft-key,
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appears • Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on apmenu.
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
Lights
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers softkey,
will be available.
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate to return to the previous menu.
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” —
If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, touch the Auto High Beams softkey,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Lights/ Smart- next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Beam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Daytime Running Lights – If Equipped
Doors & Locks
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
settings will be available.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
• Flash Headlights With Lock
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Headlights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Sound Horn With Lock
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is procheck-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
grammed touching the handle more than once will only
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door first is
return to the previous menu.
selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the use RKE transmitter).
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
• Passive Entry
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-NAfter pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Memory To FOB — If Equipped
• Horn With Remote Start
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory
Linked To FOB soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn on. To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated
Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Engine Off Options
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window switches,
radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped), DVD video
system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after
the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off Power Delay
status touch the 0 seconds, 45 seconds, 5 minutes or
10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the fol- have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
lowing settings will be available.
Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Compass Settings – If Equipped
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
4
Compass Variance Map
• Perform Compass Calibration
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also
calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
directly on the desired setting.
Audio
• Speed Adjusted Volume
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
will be available.
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
• Balance/Fade
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and back soft-key.
Fade settings.
• Equalizer
• Surround Sound
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and To make your selection, touch the Surround Sound
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow
back soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
• Suspension Display Messages
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth soft-key the follow- When All is selected, all the Air Suspension Alerts will be
ing settings will be available.
displayed. When Warnings Only is selected only the Air
Suspension Warnings will be displayed.
• Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the • Tire Jack Mode
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
When this feature is selected the air suspension system is
to the Uconnect® Access User’s Manual.
disabled to assist with changing a spare tire. Touch the
box next to your selection and a check-mark appears next
Air Suspension – If Equipped
After pressing the Suspension soft-key the following to the feature showing the system has been activated or
the check-mark is removed showing the system has been
settings will be available.
deactivated.
• Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
• Transport Mode
When this feature is selected, the vehicle lowers the
suspension for easy entry/exit. Touch the box next to When this feature is selected the air suspension system is
your selection and a check-mark appears next to the disabled to assist with flat bed towing. Touch the box
feature showing the system has been activated or the next to your selection and a check-mark appears next to
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the feature showing the system has been activated or the • Subscription Information
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
deactivated.
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with
• Wheel Alignment Mode
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be will be necessary to access the information on the Subscripenabled. Refer to your authorized dealer for further tion Information screen in order to re-subscribe.
information.
SiriusXM Setup
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Subscription Information screen.
After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the following Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
settings will be available.
the screen or visit the provider online.
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to and is available for U.S. residents only.
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the
arrow back soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
access the switches.
Located inside the center console upper lid, this feature
allows an iPod® or external USB device to be plugged
into the USB port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Access
User’s Manual.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch will tune to the next preset station that you have probetween the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/ grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD/AUX/VES, etc.).
CD Player
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
control is different depending on which mode you are in. track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
The following describes the left-hand control operation in beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
each mode.
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
To keep a CD/DVD/Blu-ray disc in good condition, take
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
the following precautions:
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface. before considering disc player service.
CD/DVD/BLU-RAY DISC MAINTENANCE
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
wiping from center to edge.
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
ing the disc.
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
or anti-static sprays.
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
General Overview
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to Hard-Keys
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
The hard-keys located below the Uconnect® screen.
system can be operated through either the Automatic
Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the
Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio,
Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-keys
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And
Soft-keys)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Soft-keys
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing turns off after 10 minutes.
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
CAUTION!
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
4. AUTO Operation Button
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
9. SYNC
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the hard-key button for warmer temperature settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the
soft-key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft-key
for warmer temperature settings.
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
10. Blower Control
automatically exit Sync.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
control. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperature
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the
soft-key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key
for cooler temperature settings.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys Panel Mode
as follows:
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
Hard-key
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted
to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
center
outlets
and outboard outlets can be moved up and
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
down
or
side
to side to regulate airflow direction. There
speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
Soft-key
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting Bi-Level Mode
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
area between the icons.
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
11. Modes
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conThe airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, warmer air from the floor outlets.
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Floor Mode
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount Provides the driver with independent temperature conof air is directed through the defrost and side trol. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperature
window demister outlets.
settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the
soft-key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key
Mix Mode
for cooler temperature settings.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
snowy conditions.
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When the defrost mode is
selected, the blower level may will increase.
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the hard-key button for warmer temperature
settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the
soft-key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft-key
for warmer temperature settings.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation
of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C
is ON.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Recirculation
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or Automatic Operation
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (4) on the
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pasRecirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons (7, 8,
13, 14). Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
system will achieve and automatically maintain that
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
comfort level.
may be unavailable (soft button greyed out) if conditions
exist that could create fogging on the inside of the wind- 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
shield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the
not necessary to change the settings. You will experiRecirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be
system to function automatically.
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED
in the control button to blink and then turn off.
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
Manual Operation
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in
this section of the manual.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Operating Tips
Winter Operation
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) coolant that meets the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106
and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection.
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
NOTE:
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
periods, as fogging may occur.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati- tions.
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .359
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .360
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .356
䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Quadra-Trac I® Operating Instructions/
Precautions – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Quadra-Trac II® Operating Instructions/
Precautions – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
5
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Quadra-Lift™ – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
▫ Quadra-Drive® II System – If Equipped. . . . . .375
▫ When To Use 4WD LOW Range –
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
䡵 SELEC-TERRAIN™ — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .376
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .389
䡵 QUADRA-LIFT™ — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .378
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . .
▫ Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . .
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check
䡵 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE
ONLY – IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .397
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Ready Alert Braking – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Rain Brake Support – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — Four-Wheel Drive
Models With MP3023 Two-Speed Transfer Case
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Select Speed Control (SSC) — Four-Wheel Drive
Models With MP3023 Two-Speed Transfer Case
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . .410
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .417
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . .422
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .425
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .433
▫ All Season Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .426 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .434
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped . . .426 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .435
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .427
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .428
▫ 3.6L Engine – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
▫ 5.7L Engine – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .444
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . .448
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .452
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . .461
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .471
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
䡵 SNOW PLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Recreational Towing – Quadra–Trac II® /
Quadra–Drive® II Four-Wheel Drive Models . . .472
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
STARTING PROCEDURES
Automatic Transmission
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat before shifting into any driving gear.
belts.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Enter-N-Go™ ACC or
RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
5
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ FOBIK is
in the passenger compartment.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine Normal Starting
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
“Normal Starting” procedure.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the 3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in
the engine starting, press the button again.
PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle Not In
pedal.
Park” message and the engine will remain running.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
START/STOP Button
could roll.
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
5
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions – With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availThe ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
an ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN If Engine Fails To Start
and START. To change the ignition switch positions
without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
WARNING!
follow these steps.
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
• Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
serious personal injury.
will display “ACC”),
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
(EVIC will display “ON/RUN”),
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
and vehicle.
return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
will display “OFF”).
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob With
Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proceIf the engine fails to start after you have followed the
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
hold it.
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
release it as soon as the starter engages.
hold it.
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 sec- The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
onds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to
The engine block heater cord is located:
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
• 3.6L Engine – coiled and strapped to the engine oil
dipstick tube.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds
before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
• 5.7L Engine – bundled and fastened to the injector
harness.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the shift lever is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
5
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK.
This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
5
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehiFuel Economy Mode Switch
cle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving condi- When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the
tions. Press the “eco” switch in the center stack of the vehicle control systems will change the following:
instrument panel and a green light will indicate the ECO
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
mode is engaged.
later.
• The torque converter clutch may engage at lower
engine speeds and remain on longer.
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The engine idle speed will be lower.
brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to
shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
• The overall driving performance will be more
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to
conservative.
“Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this sec• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhib- tion). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as
PARK to DRIVE), move the lever past the first (or second)
ited based on temperature and other factors.
detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuel
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
efficient eight-speed transmission. The electronic shift
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
lever in this vehicle does not slide like a conventional
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
shifter. Instead, the shift lever is spring loaded and moves
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
forward and rearward, always returning to the center
hundred miles (kilometers).
position after each gear is selected. The transmission gear
(PRND) is displayed both on the shift lever and in the Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). To select a accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
gear range, press the lock button on the shift lever and Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
move the lever rearward or forward. You must press the shifting between these gears.
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
The transmission shift lever provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE and SPORT shift positions. Once in
the DRIVE range, tapping the shift lever rearward will
toggle between SPORT mode and DRIVE mode. You do
not need to press the shift lever button when toggling
between DRIVE and SPORT modes. Manual shifts can be
made using the (shift paddles mounted on the steering
wheel). Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the
DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster. Refer to ⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in this
section for further information.
5
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. transfer case is in a drive position.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the shift lever is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in or
near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC
or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must
start the engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
shift lever and push the lever all the way forward until
it stops. When released, the lever will return to its
home position.
• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
gear position display and verify that it indicates the
PARK position.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds,
or while towing heavy trailers), use the Paddle Shift
switches (refer to ⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in this section) to
select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using or a
lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as
vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift schedindicate what actions may be necessary.
ule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to
make full use of available engine power. To switch between In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
DRIVE and SPORT modes, tap the shift lever rearward. can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
SPORT mode is only accessible from DRIVE.
SPORT
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
Transmission function is monitored electronically for indicates the transmission may not re-engage after enabnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may 1. Stop the vehicle.
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible.
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission 3. Turn the engine OFF.
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
also provide you with more control during passing, city
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
operation.
towing, and many other situations.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomOperation
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could will operate automatically, shifting between the eight
available gears. To engage Paddle Shift mode, simply tap
recur.
one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-)
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
while in DRIVE or SPORT mode. Tapping (-) to enter
service is required.
Paddle Shift mode will downshift the transmission to the
Paddle Shift Mode
next lower gear, while using (+) to enter Paddle Shift
Paddle Shift is a driver-interactive transmission feature mode will retain the current gear. When Paddle Shift
providing manual shift control, giving you more control of mode is active, the current transmission gear is displayed
the vehicle. Paddle Shift allows you to maximize engine in the instrument cluster.
5. Restart the engine.
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
In Paddle Shift mode, the transmission will shift up or • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
of a vehicle speed.
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will progressively
downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
at the current speed.
vehicle slows to a stop (to prevent engine lugging) and
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
Paddle Shift mode is engaged.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
fault or overheat condition is detected.
vehicle is accelerated.
NOTE: When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear
enabled, Paddle Shift mode is not active. Pressing the
(or third gear, in 4LO range, Snow mode, or Sand
(+/-) shift paddles in Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control
mode). Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in
simply limits the highest allowed gear. Shifts below and
second gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in
up to that gear will occur automatically.
snowy or icy conditions.
will display the current gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
To disengage Paddle Shift mode, press and hold the (+)
shift paddle until ⬙D⬙ or ⬙S⬙ is once again displayed in the
instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of Paddle Shift
mode at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Quadra-Trac I® Operating Instructions/
Precautions – If Equipped
The Quadra-Trac I® is a single-speed (HI range only)
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time fourwheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake
Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard
ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any
wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer
to wheels with traction.
NOTE: The Quadra-Trac I® system is not appropriate
for conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended.
Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI
position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed
The Quadra-Trac II® transfer case is fully automatic in the
the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
normal driving 4WD AUTO mode. The Quadra-Trac II®
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
transfer case provides three mode positions:
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
• 4WD HI
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
• NEUTRAL
cause damage to the transfer case.
Quadra-Trac II® Operating Instructions/
Precautions – If Equipped
• 4WD LOW
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode.
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW
position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
WARNING!
together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at
You or others could be injured if you leave the
the same speed. The 4WD LOW position is intended for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
increased tire wear and damage to driveline components.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
WARNING! (Continued)
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move regardless of the transmission position. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
NEUTRAL
This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing”
in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It locks the
front and rear driveshafts together and forces the front
Shift Positions
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. It provides
For additional information on the appropriate use of each additional traction and maximum pulling power for
transfer case mode position, see the information below: loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
4WD AUTO
This range is used on surfaces such as ice, snow, gravel, NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain® – If Equipped” for further
sand, and dry hard pavement.
information on the various positions and their intended
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain® – If Equipped” in “Start- usages.
ing and Operating” for further information on the various
positions and their intended usages.
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Procedures
4WD HI To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the
“4WD LOW” button once on the transfer case switch. The
“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster
will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is
complete.
Transfer Case Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a NOTE:
transfer case motor temperature protection condition • If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a transfer
exists, a “For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put
case motor temperature protection condition exists, a
Trans in N Press 4 Low” message will flash from the
“For 4x4 High Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put Trans
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
in N Press 4 Low” message will flash from the Elec“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Undertronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
4WD LOW To 4WD HI
information.
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop“4WD LOW” button once on the transfer case switch. The
erly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.
will flash and go out when the shift is complete.
The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to
3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster
than 3 mph (5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow
the shift.
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running.
will display on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift™ air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and
hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button
(located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
light behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift
in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR
WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) Quadra-Drive® II System – If Equipped
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
The optional Quadra-Drive® II System features two
torque transfer couplings. The couplings include an
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle and
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure the Quadra-Trac II® transfer case. The optional ELSD
that there is no vehicle movement.
axle is fully automatic and requires no driver input to
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a operate. Under normal driving conditions, the unit func“To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in tions as a standard axle, balancing torque evenly between
Owners Manual” message will flash from the Electronic left and right wheels. With a traction difference between
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic left and right wheels, the coupling will sense a speed
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding difference. As one wheel begins to spin faster than the
other, torque will automatically transfer from the wheel
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
that has less traction, to the wheel that has traction. While
the transfer case and axle coupling differ in design, their
operation is similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II® transfer
case shifting information, preceding this section, for
shifting this system.
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
SELEC-TERRAIN™ — IF EQUIPPED
Selec-Terrain™ consists of the following positions:
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces
Selec-Terrain™ combines the capabilities of the vehicle
such as snow. When in Snow mode (depending on
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
certain operating conditions), the transmission may
best performance for all terrains.
use second gear (rather than first gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage. If equipped
with air suspension, the level will change to Normal
Ride Height (NRH) if the transfer case is in high range.
The level will change to Off-Road 1 if the transfer case
is in Low range.
Description
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
operation can be used on and off road. Balances
traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
drive vehicles. If equipped with air suspension, the
level will change to NRH.
Selec-Terrain™ Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
• Sand – Off road calibration for use on low traction • Rock – Off-road calibration only available in 4WD
surfaces such as sand or wet grass. Driveline is maxiLow range. The vehicle is raised (if equipped with Air
Suspension) for improved ground clearance. Traction
mized for traction. Some binding may be felt on less
based tuning with improved steer-ability for use on
forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set
high traction off-road surfaces. Activate the Hill Deto limit traction control management of throttle and
wheel spin. If equipped with air suspension, the level
scent Control for steep downhill control. Use for low
speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If
will change to Off-Road 1.
equipped with air suspension, the vehicle level will
• Mud – Off road calibration for use on low traction
change to Off-Road 2. If the Selec-Terrain™ switch is in
surfaces such as mud. Driveline is maximized for
ROCK mode, and the transfer case is switched from
traction. Some binding may be felt on less forgiving
4WD Low to 4WD High, the Selec-Terrain™ system
surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set to limit
will return to AUTO.
traction control management of throttle and wheel
spin. If equipped with air suspension, the level will
change to Off-Road 1.
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the EVIC display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
QUADRA-LIFT™ — IF EQUIPPED
Description
The Quadra-Lift™ air suspension system provides full
time load leveling capability along with the benefit of
vehicle height adjustment by the push of a button.
Selec-Terrain™ Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Up Button
Down Button
Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp
Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp
Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp
Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard • Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
2.6 in (65 mm) – This position is intended for offroading use only where maximum ground clearance is
driving.
required. To enter OR2, press the “Up” button twice
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately
from the NRH position or once from the OR1 position
1.3 in (33 mm) – This is the primary position for all
while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While
off-road driving until OR2 is needed. A smoother and
in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)
more comfortable ride will result. Press the “Up”
the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to
button once from the NRH position while the vehicle
OR1. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
speed is below 38 mph (61 km/h). When in the OR1
and Operating” for further information.
position, if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph
(64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than • Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 0.5 in
20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph
(13 mm) – This position provides improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will
(80 km/h), the vehicle will be automatically lowered to
NRH. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle
and Operating” for further information.
speed remains between 62 mph (99 km/h) and 66 mph
(106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
(40 km/h) the Entry/Exit Mode change will be canreturn to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed
celled. To exit Entry/Exit Mode, press the “Up” button
remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph
once while in Park Mode or drive the vehicle over
(56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
15 mph (24 km/h).
speed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h). The vehicle will
enter Aero Mode, regardless of vehicle speed if the
NOTE: Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/Exit
shift lever is in the “SPORT” position.
Mode can be enabled through the Uconnect® Touch• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately Screen Radio. If this feature is enabled, the vehicle will
1.5 in (38 mm) – This position lowers the vehicle for only lower if the shift lever is in ⬙PARK⬙, the terrain switch
easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the is in ⬙AUTO⬙, and the transfer-case is in ⬙AUTO”.
rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of The Selec-Terrain™ switch will automatically change the
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, press the “Down” vehicle to the proper height based on the position of the
button once from (NRH) while the vehicle speed is Selec-Terrain™ switch. The height can be changed from
below 25 mph (40 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes the default Selec-Terrain™ setting by normal use of the
below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin air suspension buttons. Refer to “Selec-Terrain™” in
to lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph “Starting and Operating” for further information.
(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than
60 seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
The system requires that the engine be running for all
changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors,
including the liftgate, must be closed. If a door is opened
at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will
not be completed until the open door(s) is closed.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the Quadra-Lift™ air
suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The Quadra-Lift™ air suspension system uses a lifting
and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from
incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising
the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and
then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will
move down first and then the rear.
NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be
done through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect™ Access
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the
air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The
system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure
a proper appearance.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal injury or damage to the system, see your
authorized dealer for service.
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
the system in unique situations:
Air Suspension Modes
Tire/Jack Mode
Wheel Alignment Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension
system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling
to be disabled. Refer to “Uconnect® Access Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be
enabled. Refer to “Uconnect® Access Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be used with engine
running.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be used with engine If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/
running.
disabling of air suspension features must be done
through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect® Access Settings”
Transport Mode
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension system information.
has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit
height and disable the automatic load leveling system.
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Messages
When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing on the
⬙Up⬙ button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the EVIC display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Pressing the “UP” button once will move the suspension
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your one position higher from the current position, assuming
all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, speed below
Instrument Panel” for further information.
threshold, etc). The “UP” button can be pressed multiple
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error
times, each press will raise the requested level by one
has been detected.
position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest
Operation
position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle
The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show speed, etc).
the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator
lamps will show a position which the system is working
to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are
flashing on the “Up” button, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
Pressing the “DOWN” button once will move the suspension one position lower from the current level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, doors
closed, speed below threshold, etc). The “DOWN” button
can be pressed multiple times. Each press will lower the
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
requested level by one position down to a minimum of • Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illumiPark Mode or the lowest position allowed based on
nated when the vehicle is in Entry/Exit Mode. If
current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
Entry/Exit Mode is requested while vehicle speed is
between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h),
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
indicator lamp 4 will remain on solid and indicator
speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps
lamp 3 will flash as the system waits for the vehicle to
and EVIC messages will operate the same for automatic
reduce speed. If vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept
changes and user requested changes.
below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will turn off
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 4, 5, and 6 will be
and indicator lamp 3 will flash until Entry/Exit Mode
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2.
is achieved at which point indicator lamp 3 will go
solid. If during the height change to Entry/Exit Mode,
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be
the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h), the
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.
height change will be paused until the vehicle speed
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamp 4 will be
either goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) and the height
illuminated when the vehicle is in this position.
change continues to Entry/Exit Mode, or exceeds
25 mph (40 km/h) and the vehicle height will return to
NRH. Entry/Exit Mode may be selected while the
vehicle is not moving provided that the engine is still
running and all doors remain closed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
• Transport Mode - No indicator lamps will be illumi- An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
nated. Customer driving will disable Transport Mode. view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
• Tire/Jack Mode - indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
illuminated. Customer driving will disable Tire/Jack
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactoMode.
rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
• Wheel Alignment Mode - indicator lamps 3 and 4 will turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
be illuminated. Customer driving will disable Wheel type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
Alignment Mode.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
NOTE: Prior to off-road driving, remove the front air
dam to prevent damage. The front air dam is attached to
the lower front fascia with seven quarter turn fasteners
and can be removed by hand. The front license plate
bracket must be removed first if equipped.
Front Air Dam
1 — Front Bumper
2 — Front Air Dam Fasteners
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
Quadra-Lift™ – If Equipped
When To Use 4WD LOW Range – If Equipped
When off-roading, it is recommended that the lowest
useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle
or terrain be selected. The vehicle height should then be
raised as required by the changes in terrain.
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
The Selec-Terrain™ switch will automatically change the excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4WD LOW range.
vehicle to the optimized height based on the SelecTerrain™ switch position. The vehicle height can be
WARNING!
changed from the default height for each Selec-Terrain™
mode by normal use of the air suspension switches. Refer Do not drive in 4WD-LOW Range on dry pavement;
to “Quadra-Lift™ – If Equipped” in “Starting and Oper- driveline damage may result. 4WD-LOW Range
ating” for further information.
locks front and rear drivelines together and does not
allow for differential action between the front to rear
driveshafts. Driving in 4WD-LOW on pavement will
cause driveline binding and ⴖcrow-hopⴖ; use only on
wet or slippery surfaces.
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water.
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety
and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive
through water, try to determine the depth and the bottom
condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to
minimize wave effects.
NOTE: Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to
20 inches (51 cm) of water, while crossing small rivers or
streams. To maintain optimal performance of your vehicle’s heating and ventilation system it is recommended to
switch the system into recirculation mode during water Flowing Water
fording.
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off),
avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the
CAUTION!
flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing water avoid
depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water can
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
erode the streambed, causing your vehicle to sink into
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering,
deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Drivof your entry point to allow for drifting.
ing through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information. Do not shift to a
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches
lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion.
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of
will be lost.
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, beMaintenance
cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle control.
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contami- Hill Climbing
nated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance) NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to pre- conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
vent component damage.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
Standing Water
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary.
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine,
and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill,
allowing the compression braking of the engine to help
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or
skidding the tires.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion
by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a
fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide
traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly
down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
and cleaned as soon as possible.
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
WARNING!
your vehicle ready when you need it.
After Driving Off-Road
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus- • If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
values specified in the Service Manual.
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
correct the situation.
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
3.6L Engine
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM”
message and a flashing icon are displayed on
the EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
while parking and good feel while driving. If the electroIf the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” meshydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen, it
prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have
system will provide mechanical steering capability.
occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in
the power steering system. You will lose power steering
CAUTION!
assistance momentarily until the over temperature conExtreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri- dition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe,
cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system. until the light turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Normal operation will resume once the system is Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
allowed to cool.
Panel” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
NOTE:
NOTE:
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera- • Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
there is a problem with the power steering system.
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds • Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steerand during parking maneuvers.
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
service.
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
5.7L Engine
The standard power steering system will give you good
WARNING!
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical Continued operation with reduced power steering
steering capability if power assist is lost.
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Power Steering Fluid Check
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading.
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are Do not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recomapparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici- mended power steering fluid.
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authoIf necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
rized dealer.
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY –
IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
Parking Brake
PARK position.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park the instrument cluster will illuminate.
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time
and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Never
leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
Also, your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control
(TSC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Brake Lock Differential
(BLD), Ready Alert Braking, Rain Brake Support and, if it
has four-wheel drive with the MP 3023 two-speed transfer
case, Hill Descent Control (HDC), Selec Speed Control
(SSC).
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and Traction Control System (TCS)
Operating” for further information.
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited-slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further
information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump”
the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is
released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corother vehicles.
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during accelmaintain the desired path.
eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the approWARNING!
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
(Continued)
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent collisions.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
The ESC system has two available operating modes in
4WD HIGH range and two-wheel drive vehicles, and one
operating mode in 4WD LOW range.
High Range (Four-Wheel Drive Models) Or
Two-Wheel Drive Models
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD HIGH
range and in two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the
vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is
shifted from 4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to
4WD HIGH range, the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off”
mode for specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESC, except for the BLD feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” switch. This
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
4WD Low Range
Partial Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW
range. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW
range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from
4WD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range, the
ESC system will be in the “Partial Off” mode.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to
stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or greater
hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the
hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
(Continued)
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Uconnect® Access Settings. Refer to “Uconnect®
Access Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Rain Brake Support – If Equipped
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
Ready Alert Braking – If Equipped
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
reach full braking during emergency braking situations. no driver interaction is required.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — Four-Wheel Drive
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
Models With MP3023 Two-Speed Transfer Case
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Only
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow during off-road driving situations and is available in
4WD LOW range only. To enable HDC, press the HDC
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
switch.
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
When HDC is enabled, the HDC icon will be illuminated
in the instrument cluster. HDC will automatically apply
the brakes to control downhill speed to the selected level
when necessary on grades greater than approximately
8%. It will usually not activate on level ground.
HDC Operation In 4WD Low Range
To enable HDC, press the HDC switch. The HDC icon
will be illuminated in the instrument cluster and HDC
will function. If the vehicle speed goes above 20 mph
(32 km/h), the HDC icon will flash and HDC will not
The HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the function. To disable HDC, press the HDC switch.
driving conditions. The speed corresponds to the trans4WD Low Range Set Speeds
mission gear selected.
• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
HDC operation can be overridden with brake application
to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed. • 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
Conversely, if more speed is desired during HDC control,
• 3rd = 4 mph (3 km/h)
the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the
usual manner. When either the brake or the accelerator is • 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
released, HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
nal set speed.
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th= 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• PARK = HDC remains enabled but not active
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving only.
At vehicle speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h), HDC remains enabled but does not function. If the vehicle speed
is maintained above 20mph for more than 70 seconds
HDC will be disabled. If the vehicle speed goes above
40mph then HDC will immediately disable. When the
vehicle speed drops below 20 mph (32 km/h), HDC
function will automatically resume and the vehicle speed
will return to the chosen set speed.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Select Speed Control (SSC) — Four-Wheel Drive
Models With MP3023 Two-Speed Transfer Case
Only
SSC maintains vehicle speed during off-road driving
situations and is available in 4WD LOW range only.
To enable SSC, press the SSC switch. When SSC is
enabled, the SSC icon will be illuminated in the instrument cluster. SSC will automatically apply the brakes
If the driver door is open, the park brake is on, or the
to control speed to the selected level when necessary.
vehicle is not in 4WD LOW range then HDC will be
disabled.
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
The SSC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the
driving conditions. The speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected. SSC operation can be overridden
with brake application to slow the vehicle down below
the SSC control speed. Conversely, if more speed is
desired during SSC control, the accelerator pedal will
increase vehicle speed in the usual manner. When either
the brake or the accelerator is released, SSC will control
the vehicle back to the original set speed.
SSC Operation In 4WD Low Range
To enable SSC, press the SSC switch. The SSC icon will be
illuminated in the instrument cluster and SSC will function. If the vehicle speed goes above 20 mph (32 km/h),
the SSC icon will flash and SSC will not function. To
disable SSC, press the SSC switch.
4WD Low Range Set Speeds
• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 4 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th= 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
SSC is intended for low speed off-road driving only. At
vehicle speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h), SSC remains
enabled but does not function. If the vehicle speed is
maintained above 20mph for more than 70 seconds SSC
will be disabled. If the vehicle speed goes above 40mph
then SSC will immediately disable. When the vehicle
speed drops below 20 mph (32 km/h), SSC function will
automatically resume and the vehicle speed will return to
the chosen set speed. If the driver door is open, the park
brake is on, or the vehicle is not in 4WD Low then SSC
will be disabled.
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
ESC OFF Indicator Light
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
road conditions.
position. It should go out with the engine
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
NOTE:
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” Tire Markings
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
5
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaExample: T145/80D18 103M.
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
NOTE:
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its
load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted
speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation
Pressure
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the
front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI
(pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation
pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
Term
Recommended Cold Tire
Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on
the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading
capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
5
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
B-Pillar Location for Tire And Loading Information Placard
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information
on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750
the weight referenced here.
= 650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occusafely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
capacity calculated in Step 4.
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
manual to determine how this reduces the available
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pascargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic
and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Economy
Tire Inflation Pressures
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier
tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are underProper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
inflated.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not outside temperature condition.
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle The instability could cause a collision. Always use
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
tion. Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment with other types of tires.
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
WARNING!
meets the following criteria:
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi- • The tire has not been driven on when flat,
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
(sidewall damage is not repairable) and
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm)
the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
additional information.
sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immeyour vehicle.
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
Snow Tires
All Season Tires – If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
tire inflation pressures.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
checked before using these tire types.
80D18 103M.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
WARNING!
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use first opportunity.
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare first opportunity.
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to
replaced.
replacement tires in this section for further information.
Tread Wear Indicators
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
Replacement Tires
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many those of the original wheels.
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, the Security Chain Company
(SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent
is recommended on P265/60R18 or 265/50R20 tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being perThe tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at formed.
different loads and perform different steering, handling, NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
unequal rates.
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
shown in the following diagram.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
Tire Rotation
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information normal and there should be no adjustment for this
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures increased pressure.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
recommended cold tire placard pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
turned off. The system will automatically update and
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Informathe Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extintion” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
guish once the updated tire pressures have been received.
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
CAUTION!
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold tire pressure value.
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage
to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
the tire.
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
NOTE:
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible
chime will be activated, when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will
display a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for a minimum
of five seconds, an ⬙Inflate Tire to XXX⬙ message and a
graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s)
displayed in a different color. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
in PSI or kPa.
Light.
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active
road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, and inflate
the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
displayed in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XXX⬙ message. The system
will automatically update, the graphic display of the
pressure value(s) will return to its original color and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once
the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI or kPa.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
TPM sensors.
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS- 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
that affects radio wave signals.
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the
housings.
spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime will
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
sound, and the EVIC will still display a pressure value in
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
the different color graphic display and an ⬙Inflate to XXX
fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor
kPa⬙ message will be displayed. After driving the vehicle
location fault. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire
message is then followed by a graphic display, with
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off
pressure values still shown. This indicates the pressure
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the
values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but
EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of
However, the system still needs to be serviced as long as
the pressure value. For each subsequent ignition switch
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message exists.
cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. Once you
repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on
the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will
update automatically.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opIn addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
eration.
will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followtire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in ing licenses:
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) United States
MRXC4W4MA4
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Canada
2546A-C4W4MA4
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine – If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline
having an octane rating of 87. The use of
premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
5.7L Engine – If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded gasoline having an
octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer
recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates not be covered under warranty.
may be used in your vehicle.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing
10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
• operate in a lean mode
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
• poor engine performance
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• poor cold start and cold drivability
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
E-85 perform the following:
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
and California reformulated gasoline.
• change the engine oil and oil filter
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
Materials Added To Fuel
CAUTION! (Continued)
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles
only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler
door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline
Only. This section only covers those subjects that are
unique to these vehicles. Please refer to the other sections
of this manual for information on features that are common
between Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered vehicles.
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
E-85 Badge
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternating • Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recommended.
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline addi• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
tive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or Techron may
refueling
be used.
• you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
least 5 miles (8 km)
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formustarting and/or significant deterioration in driveability lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
during warm up.
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
NOTE:
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience contains additional requirements, developed during exhard starting and rough idle following start up even if tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
the above recommendations are followed, especially Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an equivawhen the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
lent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
Starting
Replacement Parts
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
CAUTION!
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
Fuel Filler Door
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the nozzle
opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches • Pour fuel into funnel opening.
allowing the flapper door to open.
• Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
• Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
• A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow
emergency refueling with a gas can.
• Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
• Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
• Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door
open.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
5
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
turn on.
(Continued)
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push down on the inboard edge of the left storage bin,
this will pop up the outboard edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
disengage snaps.
Release Cable
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in
bottom of the label is your VIN.
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle components sometimes specified by purchasers for inincluding driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehiThe label also specifies maximum capacities of front and cle’s GVWR.
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
added.
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Loading
Tire Size
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
listed.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commerInflation Pressure
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. WeighCurb Weight
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
Rim Size
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier TRAILER TOWING
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed In this section you will find safety tips and information
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
WARNING! (Continued)
standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control
of your vehicle and cause a collision.
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem- The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and and trailer when weighed in combination.
ready for operation⬙ condition.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your allowance for the presence of a driver.
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
WARNING!
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
If the gross trailer weight is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) or more,
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifiit is mandatory to use a weight-distributing hitch to
cation Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a
information.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Tongue Weight (TW)
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
more than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
Frontal Area
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, and braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with
your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable
Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
5
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:
Engine
3.6L
3.6L
5.7L
5.7L
Model
4x2
4x4
4x2
4x4
Refer to
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
7,400 lbs (3 357 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Frontal Area
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information. The addition of passengers and cargo may
Max. Trailer Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
620 lbs (281 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
740 lbs (336 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may
be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs (1 678 kg).
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the GTW
on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in
front is the cause of many trailer collisions. Never exceed
the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer
hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading
Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Towing Requirements
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recomPerform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
mended.
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for the proper inspection
procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
Towing Requirements – Tires
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized .
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
1,653 lbs (750 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
WARNING! (Continued)
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
5
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
Four-Pin Connector
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles 1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
wiring harness.
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include an adaptive drive strategy
to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use
the AutoStick® shift control to manually select a lower
gear.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
AutoStick®
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
• When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
you can get back to cruising speed.
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
maximize fuel efficiency.
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System
SNOW PLOW
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
heating, take the following actions:
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
City Driving
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectWhen stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans- edly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing
Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel OFF the
Ground
NONE
Dolly Tow
Front
Rear
ALL
On Trailer
Two-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift™ must be
placed in Transport Mode tying them down (from the
body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “QuadraLift™ – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for
more information. If the vehicle cannot be placed in
Transport mode (for example, engine will not run),
tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body).
Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes
to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing – Quadra–Trac II® /
Quadra–Drive® II Four-Wheel Drive Models
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and
the transmission must be in PARK for recreational towinto PARK.
ing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if
a dolly is used when recreational towing.
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Failure to follow these procedures can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
(Continued)
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for 4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift™ air suspenrecreational towing.
sion, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
light behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR
parts.
WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
will display on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Informarunning.
tion Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
Panel” for further information.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
9. Shift the transmission back into NEUTRAL
10. With the transmission and transfer case in NEUTRAL, press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP
button until the engine turns off. Turning the engine
off will automatically place the transmission in
PARK.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
11. Press the ENGINE STOP/START button again (without pressing the brake pedal), if needed, to turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position.
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) 12. Firmly apply the parking brake.
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift™ air
suspension, the engine should be started and left
running for a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the
doors closed) at least once every 24 hours. This process
allows the air suspension to adjust the vehicle’s ride
height to compensate for temperature effects.
• Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that must be met
before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
will flash continuously until all requirements are met Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
normal usage.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it confor a shift to take place and for the position indicator
nected to the tow vehicle.
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
3. Start the engine.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light 4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold 8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (lotransfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
selector switch.
cated by the selector switch) for one second.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the engine
OFF.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to
pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer
met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements are met
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .481 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . .498
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE– 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . .
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . .
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Models. . . . . . . .
䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
6
. . . . . . . .499
. . . . . . . .502
. . . . . . . .504
. . . . . . . .505
480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
engine cooling system.
may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
6
482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Jack Storage Location
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear cargo
area and is secured to the body with a special wing nut.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483
Preparations For Jacking
CAUTION!
Always lift or jack the vehicle from the correct jacking
points. Failure to follow this information could cause
damage to the vehicle or underbody components.
NOTE: To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery surfaces.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the
jacking position. For example, if
changing the right front tire, block
the left rear wheel.
WARNING!
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
7. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift® refer to
“Quadra-Lift® — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information on disabling automatic
leveling.
6
484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.”
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is
still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
6
Jack and Tool Assembly
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise vehicle by jacking on locations
other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions
for this vehicle.
486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange
just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular
lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Jacking Locations
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as
indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
6
Front Jacking Location
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
Rear Jacking Location
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained to install
the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum
stability.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel
nut tightness is 110 ft-lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return
it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam
tray.
6
490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
12. Remove the small center cap and securely store the 13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
road wheel in the cargo area.
soon as possible, properly secure the spare tire with
the special wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m),
reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the
rear load floor cover.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Stowed Spare
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightend of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
ness of each lug nut is 110 ft-lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt
lug nuts.
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service
station.
WARNING!
Road Tire Installation
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
6
492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING
WARNING!
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. Preparations For Jump-Start
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenfollow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and ger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
the hood to assist in jump-starting.
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493
WARNING!
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables
do not touch while still connected to the other vehicle.
6
494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission Jump-Starting Procedure
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to
remove it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or either
vehicle while making connections.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
the reverse sequence:
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with 7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
6
496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
you should have the battery and charging system tested If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
at your authorized dealer.
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
CAUTION!
front wheels. Press and hold the lock button on the shift
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets lever. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than 2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial
Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information. Once the vehicle has been freed,
press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙
mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage,
or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
(Continued)
6
498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499
MANUAL PARK RELEASE– 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park
Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away
from the console hinges.
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
6
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Manual Park Release Cover
500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal 3. While the metal latch is the open position, simultanelatch in towards the tether strap.
ously pull upwards on the tether strap until it clicks
and releases out of the park position.
Release Latch
Released Position
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly apply the parking brake.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501
To Disengage the Manual Park Release Lever:
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has
been unlocked be sure it is stowed properly and locks
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release apply tension
into position.
upward while pushing the release latch towards the
tether to unlock the lever.
6
Stowed Position
Release Latch
NOTE: Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back
in place.
502 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift™ must be
lowered to the Park (lowest) level, and have automatic
Towing
Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF
the Ground
NONE
Wheel Lift or
Dolly Tow
Front
Rear
ALL
Flatbed
leveling disabled, before tying them down (from the body)
on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to the section on
Quadra-Lift™ for more information. If the vehicle cannot be
lowered to the Park level (for example, engine will not run),
tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body).
Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to
be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
2WD Models
4WD Models
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
See instructions in “Recreational Towing” under “Starting and Operating”
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
OK
BEST METHOD
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 503
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
f you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in “What to
Do in Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
6
504 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL see “Manual
Park Release” in this section for more information.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
See “Manual Park Release” in this section for information on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable
steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the
straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the
front wheels on the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 505
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have
no NEUTRAL position, and therefore must be towed
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
with
all four wheels OFF the ground.
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and
CAUTION!
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
Four-Wheel Drive Models
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer case
may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels
on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N)
and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for detailed instructions.
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .511
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
7
508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . .559
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER . . . . . . . . .546
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
▫ Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .557
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .562
▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND
GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1
2
3
4
— Power Distribution Center
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Air Cleaner Filter
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).”
It will also store diagnostic codes and other information
to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
7
512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
of a normal bulb check.
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system is ready for testing.
happen:
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacethe ignition or start the engine. This means that your
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
not proceed to the I/M station.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
do the following:
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
crank or start the engine.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
this test over.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is available which include detailed service information for
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced attempting any procedure yourself.
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
running.
penalties being assessed against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure
the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by
the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs
will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
CAUTION! (Continued)
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform
repairs and service when necessary could result in
more costly repairs, damage to other components or
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately
have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a Change Engine Oil
fully warmed engine is shut off, or before starting the The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
engine after it has sat overnight.
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informaimprove the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain tion.
the oil level in the SAFE level range. Adding 1 U.S. Quart NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil change inter(0.95L) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE whichever occurs first.
range.
Engine Oil Selection
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
7
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
This symbol means that the oil has starting and vehicle fuel economy.
been certified by the American
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
Petroleum Institute (API). The
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
manufacturer only recommends
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine ComAPI Certified engine oils.
partment” illustration in this section.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Fiat 9.55535-S1
or Fiat 9.55535-S3 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine
oil meeting MS- 6395 is not available.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 5.7L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifistation or governmental agency for advice on how and
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
should not be used.
your area.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
7
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
maintenance intervals.
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING! (Continued)
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
7
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
7
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
the housing.
lower the door.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover.
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubrimild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulacated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
tions of salt or road film.
MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular from a dry windshield.
7
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
1 — Wiper Arm
liftgate glass.
2 — Pivot Cap
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
blade holder.
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be
indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
7
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is age:
important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
7
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, clean and flush with OAT coolant
(antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be flushed with
OAT coolant and replaced with the specified OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stanallows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concencoolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To pre−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
vent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioncoolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
your vehicle.
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
7
532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main- The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac- accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
WARNING!
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified
for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage
may result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
7
534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106)
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporyour engine which contains aluminum components.
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
Points To Remember
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535
Brake System
Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the
outboard side of the reservoir, there is a “MAX” dot and
a “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be kept within these
two dots. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark, because
leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill
hole.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill
hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage
them and cause them to leak.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m) on axles with aluminum
housings. The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs (30 to 70 N·m) on axles with
cast iron housings.
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage then
and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should
be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Adding Fluid
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Automatic Transmission
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
Selection Of Lubricant
when the vehicle is in a level position.
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
Drain
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom- only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications. It is Special Additives
important to maintain the transmission fluid at the The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
correct level using the recommended fluid.
any special additives in the transmission.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be product and its performance may be impaired by suppleused.
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications.
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
• If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission
damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the
proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However change the fluid and filter if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
7
542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Special Care
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
considered the responsibility of the owner.
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
7
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure –
If Equipped
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner: carpeting.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
with a clean, dry towel.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
leather upholstery.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deterprotectants on Stain Repel products.
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
Cleaning Headlights
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear winlights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
stone breakage than glass headlights.
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore scratch the elements.
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To directly on the mirror.
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
7
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
cloth.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be buckles do not work properly.
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp FUSES
rag.
POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains carSeat Belt Maintenance
tridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers.
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
A description of each fuse and component may be
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity numSun damage can also weaken the fabric.
ber of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
corresponds to the following chart.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
Cavity
F05
Power Distribution Center
Cavity
F03
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
Micro
Fuse
F06
40 Amp
Green
F07
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
F08
Description
F09
Rad Fan
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
F10
Micro
Fuse
Description
Compressor for
Air Suspension if
equipped
Antilock Brakes/
Electronic Stability
Control Pump
Starter Solenoid
Emission sensors
(Diesel engine only)
Diesel Fuel Heater
(Diesel engine only)
Body Controller /
Exterior Lighting #2
7
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F11
F12
F13
F14
F17
F20
F22
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Yellow
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Trailer Tow Electric
Brake - If Equipped
Body Controller #3
/ Interior Lights
Blower Motor Front
F23
Body Controller #4
/ Power Locks
Headrest Release If Equipped
Passenger Door
Module
Engine Control
Module
F26
F24
F25
F28
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Yellow
Micro
Fuse
Description
Body Controller #1
Driver Door
Module
Front Wipers
Antilock Brakes/
Stability Control
Module/Valves
Trailer Tow
Backup Lights If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
Cavity
F29
F30
F32
F34
F35
F36
Cartridge
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Trailer Tow
Parking Lights If Equipped
Trailer Tow Receptacle - If Equipped
Drive Train Control
Module
Slip Differential
Control
Sunroof If Equipped
Rear Defroster
F37
F38
F39
F40
F42
F44
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
Micro
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Description
Rear Blower If Equipped
Power Inverter
115V AC If Equipped
Power Liftgate If Equipped
Daytime Running
Lights
Horn
Diagnostic Port
7
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F46
F49
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Integrated Central
Stack / Climate
Control
Air Suspension
Control Module If Equipped
Ignition Node
Module / Keyless
Ignition / Steering
Column Lock
Battery Sensor
F50
20 Amp
Yellow
F51
10 Amp
Red
F52
5 Amp
Tan
Micro
Fuse
Description
F53
20 Amp
Yellow
F56
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
Trailer Tow – Left
Turn/Stop Lights If Equipped
Additional Content
(Diesel engine only)
Transmission
F57
F59
F60
F62
Cartridge
Fuse
Purging Pump
(Diesel engine only)
Transmission
Control Module
Air Conditioning
Clutch
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
Cavity
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
F63
20 Amp
Yellow
F70
F64
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
Ignition Coils
(Gas), Urea Heater
(Diesel)
Fuel Injectors /
Powertrain
Sunroof / Passenger
Window Switches /
Rain Sensor
CD / DVD /
Bluetooth Handsfree Module If Equipped
Rear Wiper Motor
F66
F67
F68
Cartridge
Fuse
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
F71
F73
F74
F76
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
20 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Green
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump Motor
10 Amp
Red
Audio Amplifier
HID Headlamps
Right
Brake Vacuum
Pump If Equipped
Antilock Brakes/
Electronic Stability
Control
7
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
F77
10 Amp
Red
F78
10 Amp
Red
Drivetrain Control
Module/Front Axle
Disconnect Module
Engine Control
Module / Electric
Power Steering If Equipped
Universal Garage
Door Opener /
Compass / AntiIntrusion Module
Trailer Tow Right
Turn/Stop Lights
F80
F81
Cartridge
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
Micro
Fuse
Description
F82
10 Amp
Red
F83
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Steering Column
Control Module/
Cruise Control
Fuel Door
F84
F85
F86
Cartridge
Fuse
Switch Bank/
Instrument Cluster
Airbag Module
Airbag Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
Cavity
F87
F88
F90/F91
F92
F93
F94
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
10 Amp
Red
Air Suspension /
Trailer Tow /
Steering Column
Control Module
Instrument Panel
Cluster
Power Outlet (Rear
seats) Selectable
Rear Console
Lamp - If Equipped
Cigar Lighter
F95
Shifter / Transfer
Case Module
F99
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
F96
F97
F98
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Rear Camera /
Park Assist
Rear Seat Heater
Switch / Flashlamp
Charger If Equipped
Rear Heated
Seats & Heated
Steering Wheel If Equipped
Front Heated
Seats - If Equipped
Climate Control /
Driver Assistance
Systems Module
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
7
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F100
F101
F103
F104
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
Active Damping If Equipped
Electrochromatic
Mirror/Smart
High Beams If Equipped
Cabin Heater
(Diesel engine only)
Power Outlets
(Instrument Panel/
Center Console)
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
VEHICLE STORAGE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days you may want to take steps to protect your Interior Bulbs
battery. You may:
Glove Box Lamp
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of Grab Handle Lamp
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the Overhead Console
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes Reading Lamps
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will Rear Cargo Lamp
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the Visor Vanity Lamp
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
Underpanel Courtesy
started again.
Lamps
Instrument Cluster
(General Illumination)
Telltale/Hazard Lamp
Bulb Number
194
L002825W5W
VT4976
214–2
V26377
906
103
74
7
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps (Low Beam)
Premium Headlamps
(Low/High Beam)
Headlamps (High Beam)
Premium Park/Turn
Signal Lamp
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
Premium Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
Front Fog Lamps
Front Side Marker
Premium Front Side Marker
Front Park/Turn Lamp
Body Side Turn Signal Lamps
Bulb Number
H11
D3S (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
9005
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
3157K
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
PSX24W
W5W
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
T20
7440NA (WY21W)
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps
Liftgate Backup Lamps
Rear License Lamps
Rear Body Side Turn/Stop/
Lamps
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps
CHMSL - Center High
Mounted Stop Lamp
Bulb Number
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
921 (W16W)
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
3157 P27/7W
LED - (Service at
uthorized Dealer)
LED - (Service at
uthorized Dealer)
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be
purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps , when the headlamps are turned
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) –
on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and
If Equipped
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube. system charges.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb 1. Open the hood.
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to 2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
an authorized dealer for service.
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
BULB REPLACEMENT
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
7
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Turn Signal
Front Fog Lamps
1. Open the hood.
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counterconnector.
clockwise to remove from housing.
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the
bulb.
front fog lamp housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing.
CAUTION!
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with
the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back
of the front fog lamp housing.
5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are
engaged in the slots of the collar.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp
housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are
fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp
connector.
7
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from lamp. 5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Continue removing the trim.
4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
1 — Rear Turn/Stop Bulb Socket
2 — LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
3 — Auxiliary Backup Bulb Socket
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter 2 — Backup Bulb Socket
clockwise.
6. Remove/replace bulb(s).
7. Reinstall the socket(s)
8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
7
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Rear License Lamp
The center high mounted stop lamp is LED. Service at The rear license lamps are LED. Service at Authorized
Authorized Dealer.
Dealer.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines
25 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
7 Quarts
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
10.4 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
15.4 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
16 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer Tow Package
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
94 Liters
5.6 Liters
6.6 Liters
9.9 Liters
14.6 Liters
15.2 Liters
7
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane
87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case – Single-Speed
(Quadra-Trac I®)
Transfer Case – Two-Speed
(Quadra-Trac II®)
Axle Differential (Front)
Axle Differential (Rear) –
With Electronic Limited-Slip
Differential (ELSD)
Axle Differential (Rear) –
Without Electronic Limited-Slip
Differential (ELSD)
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you only use Mopar® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic Transmission Fluid or Shell L12108 Transmission Fluid. Failure to use the correct fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353.
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-140 (API-GL5) in addition with friction modifier additive.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90
(API-GL5).
We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85
(API-GL5).
7
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir –
3.6L Engine
Power Steering Reservoir –
5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be
used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Hydraulic Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4 or MOPAR® ATF+4®
Automatic Transmission Fluid.
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 N
C
E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
568 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16 000 km) or twelve months,
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is whichever comes first.
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5 600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 569 M
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission as
needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for required maintenance.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
park brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
8
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid, change if using your
vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
2
32,000
M 570 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
T
Mileage or time passed
E
(whichever comes first)
N
A
N
Or Years:
C
E
Or Kilometers:
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
Inspect transfer case fluid.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs
(3.6L engine).**
Replace spark plugs
(5.7L engine).**
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 571 M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
M 572 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years:
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
Change transfer case fluid.
Inspect and replace PCV valve
if necessary.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 573 M
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .578
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .578
▫ In Mexico contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .582
9
576 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 577
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder.
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
9
578 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the • Authorized dealer name
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
solved with this process.
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. Phone: (877) 426–5337
They want to know if you need assistance.
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, P.O. Box 1621
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 579
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
580 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract.
It is not responsible for any service contract other than
the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service
contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 581
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in roadsafety/
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
9
582 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order
form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acin diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, mainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
taining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC
Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintevehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
system, and/or components is written in straightforward
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 583
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
9
584 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance,
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
586 INDEX
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .188
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .518
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .339
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
INDEX 587
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .260 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . .
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . .
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)
Carbon Monoxide Warning . .
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . .
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . .
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.516
.394
.532
.110
.274
.271
.271
.272
.272
.275
.542
.331
10
588 INDEX
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . .511
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .532
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.529
.531
.563
.533
.533
.530
.529
.534
.532
.532
.530
.541
.188
.266
.577
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
INDEX 589
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.446
.359
.260
.278
.126
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . .
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.397
.399
.400
.184
.400
.292
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.496
.480
.492
.498
.511
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.518
.356
.108
.509
.509
.529
10
590 INDEX
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal .
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning . . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . . .
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . .
Fuel Requirements . .
Maintenance . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . .
Starting . . . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.518
.342
.518
.517
.480
.480
.113
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.449
.448
.446
.449
.449
.449
.354
INDEX 591
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . .
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . .
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Front Axle (Differential). . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .563 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .113
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .540
Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .535
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .514
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .394
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .564
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .286
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .558
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .154
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .213
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .480
. . . . . . . . . . .369 Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .369 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .369 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .369
. . . . . . . . . . .496 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
. . . . . . . . . . .537 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.442
.450
.445
.443
.359
.443
.442
.290
.445
.443
.442
.442
.563
.446
.450
.546
. . . . . . . . . . . .244
. . . . . . . . . . . .443
10
592 INDEX
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Hazard Warning Flasher
Headlights . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . .
On With Wipers . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.480
.557
.557
.545
.165
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener)
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.174
.557
.127
.356
.286
.406
.404
. . . . . . . . . . . .460
. . . . . . . . . . . .244
. . . . . . . . . . . .162
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
INDEX 593
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Jacking Instructions .
Jack Location . . . . .
Jack Operation . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.484
.481
.484
.492
Key-In Reminder . . .
Keyless Enter-N-Go .
Keyless Entry System
Keyless Go. . . . . . . .
Key, Programming . .
Key, Replacement . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.16
.36
.23
.14
.19
.19
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
10
594 INDEX
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .286
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .410
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .286
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
INDEX 595
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .286
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
10
596 INDEX
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .418
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .260
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
INDEX 597
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .473
Quadra-Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .476
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .532 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .329
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
10
598 INDEX
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .58
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Security Against Theft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
INDEX 599
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Snow Plow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .329
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .68
10
600 INDEX
Suspension, Air. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . .
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard . .
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.285
.179
.339
.288
.275
.179
.417
.411
.113
.430
.422
.433
.427
.422
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.425
.423
.430
.417
.435
.290
.583
.425
.431
.434
.411
.413
.426
.482
.429
.465
.430
.411
INDEX 601
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . .
Trailer and Tongue Weight .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . .
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.462
.498
.455
.461
.471
.461
.398
.403
.455
.470
.460
.463
.462
.467
.461
.461
.538
.538
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .244
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .23
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
10
602 INDEX
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into
this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity
to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios
and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be
observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made
directly to the battery and fused as close to the
battery as possible. The negative power connection
should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the
negative battery connection. This connection
should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on
the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should
be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases.
Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of
the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical
and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio
to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater
than normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems.
2014 Grand Cherokee
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
14WK741-126-AB
2014
Third Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Grand Cherokee
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement